User Manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsCalculatorsfx-9750GIII

CASIO ﻲﳌﺎﻌﻟﺍ ﻲﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﺐﻳﻮﻟﺍ ﻊﻗﻮﻣ

https://edu.casio.com

ﻊﻗﻮﳌﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺕﺎﻐﻟ ﺓﺪﻌﺑ ﺓﺮﻓﻮﺘﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺒﻴﺘﻛ

https://world.casio.com/manual/calc/

(3.21 ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ)

fx-9860GIII

(3.21 ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ)

fx-9750GIII

(3.20 ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ)

fx-7400GIII

ﺮﻳﻮﺘﻓﻮﺴﻟﺍ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (454 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪fx-9860GIII‬‬ ‫‪) fx-9750GIII‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(3.21‬‬ ‫‪) fx-7400GIII‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(3.20‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(3.21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ‪CASIO‬‬ ‫‪https://edu.casio.com‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪https://world.casio.
PAGE 2
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪1-1........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪1-2..........................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
‫‪ .12‬ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪5-30 ......................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪6-1..................................................................................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪11-1 ...........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪12-1 ............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪12-1 ........................................................................
PAGE 6
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ‪ -‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ fx-9860GIII‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪ u‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪. 6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﻻﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ )‪ 1(COMP‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ }‪ {COMP‬ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 9
‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪STAT‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫*‪TVM‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫*‪E-CON3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LINK‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MEMORY‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪ u‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.2E+12‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ 1.2 × 1012‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪.1,200,000,000,000‬‬ ‫‪ 1.2E–03‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ ‪ 1.2 × 10–3‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ 1.2‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪.0.0012‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010 .......................
PAGE 13
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ‪.‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ‪ .*1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ..!D(INS‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺎ ”‪ “I‬ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ ” “ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﺍﻭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫‪w‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪db‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﹼ ﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(CUT‬ﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ*‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 17
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ fx-9750GIII‬ﻭ‪ :fx-9860GIII‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ )ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "1:All‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣ ﹴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ )‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ(" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-10‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (c, f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(INPUT‬ﺍﻭ ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ )‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.5(HIST‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(INPUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII) QR Code‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ QR Code‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.QR Code‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.!J‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﻢ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(1-31‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‬ ‫)‪!)(x –1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫)'(‪!x‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫)'‪!((3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫)'‪!M(x‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫)‪!I(ex‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫)‪!l(10x‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ex‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫)‪log(a,b‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*‪(2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪) Abs‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ* (‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*‪(2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*‪(2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*‪(2‬
PAGE 21
‫)‪d f(x‬‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {d/dx‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪x = a‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬ ‫‪d2 f(x)x = a‬‬ ‫‪{ 2‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 22
1 1+ 0 x + 1dx ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ :3 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) v+b ea fb e w 2× 1 2 2 2 1 2 ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT)1(2×2) 'bcc ee !x(')ce e!x(')cee'bcc w fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII (Math :Input/Output) fx-9750GIII (Mth/Mix :Input/Output) 1-15 :4 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
PAGE 23
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ) ‪ 120‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫'‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)'(‪!x‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫)'‪!((3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)'‪!M(x‬‬ ‫‪ex‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫)‪log(a,b‬‬ ‫)‪!I(ex‬‬ ‫)‪!l(10x‬‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)2(logab‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)3(Abs‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)4(d/dx‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)5(d2/dx2‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫)‪1(∫dx‬‬ ‫‪ Σ‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫) (‪2(Σ‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ !D(INS‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ (w‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻺﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ)‪aD(UNDO‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ)‪.aD(UNDO‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ .A‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ A‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪aD(UNDO‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 26
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،1 × 6‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .6 × 1‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،VctAns‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،ListAns‬ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.
PAGE 27
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،e • ACT‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳋﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،RUN • MAT‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪Comp :Mode‬‬‫ ‪ Math :fx-9860GIII :Input/Output‬ﻭ‪ Math :fx-9750GIII‬ﺃﻭ ‪Mth/Mix‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،e • ACT‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 29
‫*‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪= 0.1249387366‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪A4(MATH)3(Abs)l3'4w‬‬ ‫‪log‬‬ ‫‪2 + 3 1 = 73‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4 20‬‬ ‫‪1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i‬‬ ‫‪2 10‬‬ ‫‪A2'5e+3!'(()1e4w‬‬ ‫)‪ F‬ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪A1.5+2.
PAGE 31
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪×8‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪beb'ceedde‬‬ ‫‪bd'eeefege‬‬ ‫‪*iw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ ‪Mat J‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)a)(J)w‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ D‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-12‬ﻭ "ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-22‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ RUN • MAT‬ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ، e • ACT‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ’’ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪EQUA‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ EQUA‬ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ))‪ (1(SIML‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ))‪ ، (2(POLY‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ‪،‬ﻭ '‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ π‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ))‪ ، (3(SOLV‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪ x2 + 3x + 5 = 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 34
‫• }‪} ... {ANGL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،‬ﻭ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {ESYM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {PICT‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {FMEM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {LOGIC‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CAPT‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {TVM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ‪ PICT‬ﻭ ‪ FMEM‬ﻭ ‪ CAPT‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫• }‪} ... {Y‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪{y-‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {y}/{Σy}/{Σy2}/{Σxy}/{σx}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxY‬ﻭﺳﻂ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪x-‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪}/{y-‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{‪}/‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{‪}/‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‪}/‬ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {GRPH‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{e‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {r}/{r2‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{‪}/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {MSe‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Q1}/{Q3‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻻﻭﻝ‪}/{-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 36
‫• }‪=X} ... {X‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫*‪ — DYNA‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{{‪}/‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪ — TABL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺇﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 37
‫‪ .7‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(PRGM‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PRGM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .!J(PRGM‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪.(PRGM‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ (PRGM‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Math‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ........ {COM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} .......... {CTL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ....... {JUMP‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{‬ ‫• }?{ ‪} .............‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{‬ ‫• }^{ ‪} ...........
PAGE 38
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ !m(SET UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ( 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﻖ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ﺣﲔ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Deg}/{Rad}/{Gra‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{‪}/‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Real‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {a+bi}/{r∠θ‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ}ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{‪}/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪) Coord‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 40
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ) ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {None}/{PICT‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ{‪}/‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ(‬ ‫•}‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫{‪}/‬‬ ‫{‪}/‬‬ ‫{‪}/‬‬ ‫{ ‪} ...‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ{‪}/‬ﻛﺜﻴﻒ{‪}/‬ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ{‪}/‬ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ{‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ* ) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Cnt}/{Stop‬ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ)ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ({‪}/‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ* )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 41
‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪) *Imp Multi‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {On‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.2-2‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {Off‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪) 7‬ﻟـ"ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (2-2‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻳﺢ‬ ‫)‪0‬ﻟـ"ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ"(‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪) *Auto Calc‬ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 42
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،(RUN‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪K6(g‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝ ‪6(g)5(CAPT)(4(CAPT) (fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫)‪1(RCL‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، 20‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ، 1‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻻﻣﺮ ‪ RclCapt‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺴﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻻﺧﺮﻯ ‪،‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ -‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8‬‬ ‫‪56*-12/-2.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪200/7*14w‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫‪1(Fix)dwJw‬‬ ‫‪400.000‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪200/7w‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪14w‬‬ ‫‪28.571‬‬ ‫‪Ans × I‬‬ ‫‪400.000‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪', ', log, In, e , 10 , sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1, cosh–1,‬‬ ‫‪tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml,‬‬ ‫‪Percent, AList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 2*7‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ، A‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ، C‬ﻭ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫• ‪fx-9860GIII ،fx-9750GIII ،fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫)‪ = Rad‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( ‪2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691‬‬ ‫• ‪(Imp Multi: On) fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫• ‪fx-7400GIII ،fx-9860GIII‬‬ ‫• ‪(Imp Multi: Off) fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫‪6 ÷ 2 (1 + 2) = 1‬‬ ‫‪6 ÷ 2 (1 + 2) = 9‬‬ ‫‪6 ÷ 2π = 0.9549296586‬‬ ‫‪(Input/Output: Math) 6 ÷ 2π = 3π‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ‪ Σ‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ‪ /‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ RndFix‬ﺃﻭ ‪ logab‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ u‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ '‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺪﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫'‪b ± d‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫'‪± a‬‬ ‫'‪b, ± d ± a‬‬ ‫'‪b, ± a‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )‪ (a، b، c، d، e، f‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ '‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪ u‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪π‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ π‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪nπ‬‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻲ |‪.|106‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ π‬ﺃﻭ ‪a π‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪b b‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ‪} ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ + a‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ +b‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ {c‬ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪c c‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ c‬ﺛﻼﺙ‪.*2‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪*1*2 .
PAGE 50
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫))‪6 ÷ (2(1 + 2‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪6 ÷ 2(1 + 2‬‬ ‫))‪6 ÷ (A(1 + 2‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪6 ÷ A(1 + 2‬‬ ‫)‪1 ÷ ((2 + 3)sin30‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪1 ÷ (2 + 3)sin30‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫→ ‪6 ÷ 2π‬‬ ‫)‪6 ÷ (2π‬‬ ‫'‪2 ÷ (2‬‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫'‪2 ÷ 2‬‬ ‫→ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪4π ÷ (2π‬‬ ‫→ ‪4π ÷ 2π‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "Off‬ﻟـ"‪ "Imp Multi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺏ‪ 28‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ‪ plus r ،‬ﻭ ‪ . θ‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 52
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[FMEM‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ GRAPH‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PRGM‬ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 53
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫*)‪K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM‬‬ ‫)‪4(SEE‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(FMEM‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫*)‪K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM‬‬ ‫‪1(STO)bw‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(FMEM‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ) w‬ﻭﺍﻻ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-19‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ )‪ (faal(B)w‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )‪(Fix‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪1(Fix)cw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪.(n = 0 to 9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )‪(Sci‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪2(Sci)dw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )‪.(n = 0 to 9‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ ‪.10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ .4‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪. K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.PRGM‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )‪(HYP‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[HYP‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }‪{sine}/{cosine}/{tangent‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 57
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪(ANGL‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[ANGL‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {°}/{r}/{g‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{‪}/‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪} ... {°‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪} ... {°‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ ‪ {°‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ...
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪cos ( π rad) = 0.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc*2(Rad)J‬‬ ‫‪(π)/3)w‬‬ ‫!(‪c‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc*1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775‬‬ ‫‪2*s45*c65w*1‬‬ ‫‪sin–10.5 = 30°‬‬ ‫‪!s(sin–1) 0.5*2w‬‬ ‫)‪ x‬ﺣﲔ ‪(sinx = 0.5‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GIII: ccccc‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ *‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144‬‬ ‫‪log28 = 3‬‬ ‫‪l1.
PAGE 59
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪!x(') 2+!x(')5w*1‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫'‪2 +‬‬ ‫‪5 = 3.65028154‬‬ ‫‪(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪–––––– = 12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫–– – ––‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪(-3)xw‬‬ ‫)‪(3!)(x−1)-4!)(x−1‬‬ ‫‪)!)(x−1)w‬‬ ‫‪8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × ....
PAGE 60
‫• ﻭﻳﻮﻟﺪ ”‪ “a‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻝ ”‪ .“a‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻟـ ‪ a‬ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Ran# 0‬ﺗﻬﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ‪ Ran#‬ﻭ ‪ RanList#‬ﻣﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Ran#‬ﻭ ‪،RanList#‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ‪Ran#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪Ran#‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪(.
PAGE 61
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(Ranlnt#‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﹼﻮﻥ ‪ RanInt#‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RanInt# (A, B [,n]) A < B |A|,|B| < 1E10 B – A < 1E10 1 < n < 999‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‪ .‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ ‪ n‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻟـ ‪ n‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪RanInt# (1, 5‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(.
PAGE 62
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )‪(RanBin#‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺛﺮﻱ ‪ n‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪.p‬‬ ‫‪0
PAGE 63
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫!‪n‬‬ ‫!)‪(n – r‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫!‪n‬‬ ‫= ‪nCr‬‬ ‫!)‪r! (n – r‬‬ ‫= ‪nPr‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.1-12‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪2'*5+3'*1'*4w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫––– = –– ‪–– + 3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫**‪f‬‬ ‫‪)*1‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( ‪= 3.65‬‬ ‫‪1'*2578+1'*4572w‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪––––– + ––––– = 6.066202547 × 10–4 *2‬‬ ‫‪2578‬‬ ‫‪4572‬‬ ‫‪1'*2*.5w‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪–– × 0.5 = 0.
PAGE 65
‫‪ k‬ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )‪(AND, OR, NOT, XOR‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LOGIC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ AND} ... {Xor}/{Not}/{Or}/{And‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ OR}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ NOT}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ XOR}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪ k‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫]÷‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Int‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”÷‪ “Int‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪107 ÷ 7‬‬ ‫)‪AbahK4(CALC)*6(g‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Int÷)h‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Rmdr‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪ “Rmdr‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪60 20‬‬ ‫‪Abf'*gaw‬‬ ‫‪K4(CALC)**6(g)6(g)3(Simp)w‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GIII: v‬‬ ‫)‪** fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC‬‬ ‫‪3(Simp)w‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ "=‪."F‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻝ ‪9‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫**)‪Ach'*gdwK4(CALC‬‬ ‫‪6(g)6(g)3(Simp)jw‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GIII: v‬‬ ‫)‪** fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪ k‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪f(x‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[SolvN‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ SolvN‬ﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ f(x‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)]ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪,‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪] [,‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪] [,‬ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( ‪SolvN‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ "]ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ" ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ،r ،Z‬ﻭ ‪ .θ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ = ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪ ،Ax‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟـ )‪ f' (a‬ﻛـ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪f (a + Ax) – f (a‬‬ ‫––––––––––––– ⱌ )‪f ' (a‬‬ ‫‪Ax‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ x = 3‬ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﺡ ﻝ‬ ‫‪“tol” = 1E – 5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪.f(x‬‬ ‫‪AK4(CALC)* 2(d/dx)vMd+evx+v-g,‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ x=a‬ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ‪ Σ‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ‪/‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ ‪ RndFix‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ logab‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ 1E–10‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪. A‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (Rad‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b,f,‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-e)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = ‪(Deg‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 73
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،f(x‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ X‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪،X‬‬ ‫‪ (θ ،r‬ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ "‪ "tol‬ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ "‪ ،"tol‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ ‪.1E–5‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ k‬ﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪/‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﳉﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 2-1‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪.2-16‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪ ... {Real‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬ ‫•‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 76
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 77
‫)‪AK3(CPLX)*2(Abs‬‬ ‫‪(d+e1(i))w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫)‪AK3(CPLX)*3(Arg‬‬ ‫‪(d+e1(i))w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ(‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫' ‪ 1 +‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪3 i‬‬ ‫*‪!m(SET UP)cccccc‬‬ ‫‪1(Deg)c2(a+bi)J‬‬ ‫)‪Ab+(!x(')d‬‬ ‫‪K3(CPLX)**1(i)6(g)3('r∠θ)w‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GIII: ccccc‬‬ ‫)‪** fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫‪Ac!v(∠)ga‬‬ ‫‪K3(CPLX)*6(g)4('a+bi)w‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 21‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪،12310‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪3(Hex)J‬‬ ‫‪A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(LOG‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Neg‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ{ ‪*1‬‬ ‫• }‪{NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3 ...
PAGE 81
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪) 2210‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪A!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2(Dec)J‬‬ ‫‪1(d~o)1(d)ccw‬‬ ‫‪J3(DISP)3('Bin)w‬‬ ‫‪4('Oct)w‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪. fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ RUN • MAT‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1('MAT‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1('MAT‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) m … m × n‬ﺻﻒ( × ‪) n‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ …None‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL}/{DEL•A‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ }ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{‪}/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DIM‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CSV‬ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪ Mat A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Mat Z‬ﻭ ‪) (MatAns‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-43‬‬ ‫ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-52‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 83
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪..‬‬ ‫‪bwcwdw‬‬ ‫‪ewfwgw‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ ،w‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(R • OP‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Swap‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {×Rw‬ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {×Rw+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Rw+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺻﻔﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪1(R • OP)4(Rw+‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪dww‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 86
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {ADD‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪3(COL)e‬‬ ‫)‪1(DEL‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪CVS‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CVS‬ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪ Mat A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،Mat Z‬ﻭ ‪ .(MatAns‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪ Mat A‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ،Mat Z‬ﻭ ‪ (MatAns‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 87
‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.4(CSV)2(SV • AS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "‪."ROOT‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SV • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 88
‫‪ u‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a22 ... a2n‬‬ ‫‪a21‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫] ]‪= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn‬‬ ‫‪a12 ... a1n‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪am2 ...
PAGE 89
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ }‪ {Dim‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪B‬‬ ‫‪!*( { )c,d!/( } )a‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Mat)al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪ "Dim‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﳌﻞﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)3(Fill‬‬ ‫‪d,6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪ "Fill‬ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫=‪B‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫=‪A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)5(Aug‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)av(A),‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻤﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﲢﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(MAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Mat‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ ) Mat‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Det‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ ) Det‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Trn‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪) Trn‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 92
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Det‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1 −2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)3(Det)1(Mat‬‬ ‫‪av(A)w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ 2 × 2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a11 a12‬‬ ‫‪= a11a22 – a12a21‬‬ ‫‪a21 a22‬‬ ‫= |‪|A‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ 3 × 3‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ u‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Ref‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ﻻﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)4(Ref‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Rref‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 94
‫• ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 0‬‬ ‫‪0 1‬‬ ‫= ‪A A–1 = A–1 A = E‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ A‬ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= D‬‬ ‫‪1+i‬‬ ‫‪–2 + 2i‬‬ ‫‪–1 + i‬‬ ‫‪1+i‬‬ ‫)‪AK6(g)4(NUM)1(Abs‬‬ ‫‪K2(MAT)1(Mat)as(D)w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪(VctAns‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﱢﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﲢﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1 × 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1 × 3‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 2 × 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.3 × 1‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ‪ ±1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪ u‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Vct‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Vct A + Vct B‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct B = [ 3 4‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct‬‬ ‫‪av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Vct A × Vct B‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫= ‪Vct B‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct‬‬ ‫‪av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Mat A × Vct B‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫= ‪Vct B‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
PAGE 99
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Angle‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ‬ ‫] ‪Vct B = [ 3 4‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪4(Angle)1(Vct)av(A),‬‬ ‫‪1(Vct)al(B))w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[UntV‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 5 5‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪5(UntV)1(Vct)av(A))w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Norm‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 3‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫)‪1(Norm)6(g)
PAGE 100
‫• ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ (“AREA‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ (“TIME‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (2-58‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CONV‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪fm‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪cm3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪Å‬‬ ‫ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪mL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪μm‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪in3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ft3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪km‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪AU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪mm‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪m3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(UK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻧﺲ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(US‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪l.y.
PAGE 102
‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪kPa‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪°F‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪mmH2O‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪°R‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ‬ ‫‪mmHg‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪m/s‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪km/h‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪knot‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪inHg‬‬ ‫‪ft/s‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪lbf/in2‬‬ ‫‪mile/h‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪bar‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺫﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪kgf/cm2‬‬ ‫‪mg‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪°C‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Pa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺠﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪atm‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ‬
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 104
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } (‪ !/‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫) } (‪!*( { )g,h,i!/‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)3(DEL‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 106
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ !a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪. ALPHA-LOCK‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪-(Y)c(E)v(A)g(R)w‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪(RUN‬‬ ‫‪!b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w‬‬ ‫)‪ = n‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻟـ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)1(TOOL)1(SRT • A‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ "ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟" ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ، ":‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪bw‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪ (11, 12, 13, 14, 15‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪AK1(LIST)2(L→M‬‬ ‫‪1(List)b,1(List)c)w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <26 - 1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ"‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq‬‬ ‫>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ< ‪> ,‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< ‪> ,‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ< ‪> ,‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< )‪K1(LIST)5(Seq‬‬ ‫‪> )w‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ< ‪,‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،112 ،62 ،12‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪f(x) = X2 .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 11‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ( ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ListAns‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "AList 1 → List 2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ AList 1‬ﻓﻲ ‪.List 2‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ AList‬ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ AList‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 113
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ }‪ ،{ ،‬ﻭ ‪.,‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪56, 82, 64 :‬‬ ‫‪!*( { )fg,ic,‬‬ ‫) } (‪ge!/‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ a‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (41, 65, 22) 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1(LIST)1(List)d‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫) } (‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺏ ‪36‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)*dgw‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ )‪sin (List 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪sK1(LIST)1(List)dw‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .CSV‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،CSV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)6(g)1(CSV‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(2-39‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ )‪ 1(LOAD)1(LIST‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)6(g)1(CSV‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.2(SV • AS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "‪."ROOT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SV • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.EQUA‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SIML‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {POLY‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{6‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SOLV‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪1 m EQUA‬‬ ‫)‪2 1(SIML‬‬ ‫)‪2(3‬‬ ‫‪3 ewbw-cw-bw‬‬ ‫‪bwgwdwbw‬‬ ‫‪-fwewbw-hw‬‬ ‫)‪4 1(SOLV‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 121
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، w‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(CLR‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ Solve Calculation‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪EQUA‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SOLV‬ﺍﳊﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪Graphing‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫)≤‪5(CONV)1('Y=) to 5('Y‬‬ ‫≤‪ ... 6(g)1('X=) to 5('X‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫)≤‪ ....Y 6(g)1(Y>) to 4(Y‬ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫)≤‪ .... 6(g)6(g)1(X>) to 4(X‬ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(5-6‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) V-Window‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ ،y‬ﻭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 126
‫• ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ –9.999999999 97E‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9.999999999E 97‬‬ ‫‪ V-Window k‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪V-Window Memory‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !3(V-WIN‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪. V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(STO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 127
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪!2(ZOOM)1(BOX) ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪2(FACT‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪3(IN)/4(OUT) ...‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ ‪5(AUTO) ...
PAGE 128
‫)‪2 !2(ZOOM)1(BOX‬‬ ‫‪3 d~dw‬‬ ‫‪4 d~d,f~fw‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 129
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Xt3‬ﻭ ‪:Yt3‬‬ ‫‪x = 3 sinT‬‬ ‫‪y = 3 cosT‬‬ ‫‪ ) 3(TYPE)3‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻱ (‬ ‫‪)dsvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪( x‬‬ ‫‪ )dcvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪( y‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ ‪ Y2‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ ‪Y4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X + 3‬‬ ‫‪ ,Y2 °Y1 to Y4.
PAGE 130
‫ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-30‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Y1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ y = 2x2 – 5‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪y = 2x2 – 3‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ( ‪e‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ‪eeeeeDd‬‬ ‫) ﹼ‬ ‫)ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ( ‪w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 131
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (Xt2‬ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ‪ ،Yt2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ‪(Xt2‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SEL‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SEL‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ k‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(20‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) V-Window‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 133
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،GRAPH‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ K1(PICT)2(RCL‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w,‬ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (Pict 1) 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.bw‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (5-29‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 134
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SEL‬ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ” ‪ “ B‬ﺃﻭ ” ‪. “ R‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ )‪ y = x(x + 1)(x – 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Xmin = –2,‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪Xscale = 0.
PAGE 135
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ‪y = 2x2 + 3x – 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 136
‫‪3 !3(V-WIN)-cawcawfwc‬‬ ‫‪-bcwbcwfw‬‬ ‫‪awe!5(π)w!5(π)/dgwJ‬‬ ‫‪4 !4(SKTCH)1(Cls)w‬‬ ‫)‪5(GRPH)3(Param‬‬ ‫‪5 hcv-ccd.fv,‬‬ ‫‪hsv-csd.fvw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﹸﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪(x + 2)(x – 1)(x – 3) dx‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ y = Ax2 – 3‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-1 ،1 ،3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪Xscale = 1‬‬ ‫‪Yscale = 2‬‬ ‫‪Xmax = 5,‬‬ ‫‪Ymax = 10,‬‬ ‫‪Xmin = –5,‬‬ ‫‪Ymin = –10,‬‬ ‫‪1 m GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪2 !m(SET UP)cccc*3(Off)J‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GIII: ccc‬‬ ‫‪3 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc‬‬ ‫‪-bawbawcwJ‬‬ ‫‪4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d,‬‬ ‫‪!+( [ )av(A)!.(=)d,b,-b‬‬ ‫‪!-( ] )w‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 138
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ ‪ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ Y=X‬ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Xscale = 2‬‬ ‫‪Xmax = 5,‬‬ ‫‪Xmin = –5,‬‬ ‫‪Yscale = 5‬‬ ‫‪Ymax = 10,‬‬ ‫‪Ymin = –10,‬‬ ‫‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪1 m (RUN‬‬ ‫‪a-(Y)!.
PAGE 139
‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ x-‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، 3‬ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(TABL‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(3 ،2 ،1 ،0 ،-1 ،-2 ،-3) 6‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.
PAGE 141
‫• }‪} ... {G • CON}/{G • PLT‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ{‪}/‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ{ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻏﻴﺮ‪ (x-‬ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪.
PAGE 142
‫‪2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc‬‬ ‫‪-cwbawcwJ‬‬ ‫‪3 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw‬‬ ‫‪vxw‬‬ ‫‪4 5(SET)-dwdwbwJ‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪6 5(G • CON‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ T+G‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.TABLE‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ T+G‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 143
‫‪ .8‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.DYNA‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫←‬ ‫↑↓‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ "ﻣﻮﺿﻊ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 145
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪DOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻝ ‪ =Y‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !m(SET UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ccc‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ =Y‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ … 1(Norm‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪ ) .X‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫)‪ … 2(High‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ –‪) .X‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 146
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪3(TYPE) 1(an) ...{an‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ‪-‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ ‪2(an+1)...‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ‪-‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ ‪3(an+2)...‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻝ ‪ . n‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 147
‫‪1 m RECUR‬‬ ‫‪2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc‬‬ ‫‪-bfwgfwfwJ‬‬ ‫‪3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw‬‬ ‫‪4 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ‬‬ ‫‪)J‬‬ ‫(‪5 1(SEL+S)f2‬‬ ‫)‪6 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪7 5(G • CON‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 148
‫)‪5 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪6 3(PHAS‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ RECUR‬ﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 3(PHAS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ....... 1(a • b‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ bn (bn+1, bn+2‬ﻭ )‪an (an+1, an+2‬‬ ‫)‪ ....... 2(b • c‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ cn (cn+1, cn+2‬ﻭ )‪bn (bn+1, bn+2‬‬ ‫)‪ .......
PAGE 149
‫‪ k‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )‪ y = f(x‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ‪ an+1 = y, an = x‬ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻲ )‪ an+1 = f(an‬ﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ . an+1, an‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RECUR‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 150
‫‪ .10‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.CONICS‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ CONICS‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.CONICS‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫)‪} ....1(RECT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{‬ ‫)‪} ....2(POL‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{‬ ‫)‪} ....3(PARM‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ{‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 151
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ … 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‪ … 2‬ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ) ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‪ … 3‬ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ )ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ(‬ ‫(‪ … 4‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ﺫﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪*1.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪!4(SKTCH) 1(Cls) ...‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ‪2(Tang) ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪3(Norm) ...
PAGE 152
‫‪4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v‬‬ ‫‪-c)w‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫)‪6 !4(SKTCH)2(Tang‬‬ ‫‪7 e~ew*1‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﳑﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ” “ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،!1(TRCE‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪*1.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 153
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)‪ ، !1(TRCE‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪ - y‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪4(Y-ICPT)...‬‬ ‫‪5(ISCT) ... I‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ ‪ -y‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... x‬‬ ‫‪ - y‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ - x‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ ‪6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪6(g)3(∫dx) ...‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (k‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 155
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )‪f(x) type‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ )‪ (Y > f(x), Y < f(x), Y t f(x) or Y s f(x‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ y-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪x‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ‪ x-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.y‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ )‪.(–2 ,0‬‬ ‫)‪Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.10-‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[G-SLV]-[FOCS]/[LEN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪(Y – 2)2 + 3 = X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 159
‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ List 1‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ List 1‬ﻭ ‪ List 2‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪-‬ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ x-‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.y-‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪ .
PAGE 160
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {LIST‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪{26‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {%}/{Data‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‬ ‫• ‪) % Sto Mem‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 161
‫‪Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2‬‬‫)ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ– ‪ x‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪Sample t Test, χ2 GOF Test, χ2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪) x-‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪) y-‬ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ x/y‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 162
‫⇒‬ ‫)‪w(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (Q1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫)‪ ،(Q3‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪ .(Med‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ‪ (whiskers‬ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫)‪ (minX‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ )‪ (maxX‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ XList‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ Freq‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻝ ‪Freq‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ XList‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ‪ Freq‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻝ ‪ Freq‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 164
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(DRAW‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Q1Q3‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ”‪) “Std‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “OnData‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪Q1‬ﻭ ‪.Q3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Std‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ، “OnData‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻝ"ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Std‬ﻭ "‪ "OnData‬ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪2+3‬‬ ‫‪= Q1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7+8‬‬ ‫‪= Q3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 0.25‬ﲤﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Q1‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪OnData u‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫‪} = Q3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.75‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.75‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪(10 :‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1/10 = 0.1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2/10 = 0.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/10 = 0.
PAGE 167
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪xy‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪. xy‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Scat‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ‪) xy‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪(xy‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2‬‬ ‫)‪ y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4‬‬ ‫‪1 m STAT‬‬ ‫‪2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe‬‬ ‫‪-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew‬‬ ‫)‪1(GRPH)6(SET)c1(Scat)J1(GPH1‬‬ ‫)‪3 1(CALC)6(g)2(Log‬‬ ‫)‪4 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪) y-‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ y-‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ x = 0‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪ ........ y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪c .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪d .........‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪(y-‬‬ ‫‪ ............ y = ax2 + bx + c‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪c .........‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪(y-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪................. y = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a ...........
PAGE 171
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ y‬ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪، y = a × xb‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ = y‬ﻓﻲ × ‪ a + b‬ﻓﻲ ‪ . x‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ‪= x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ، x‬ﻭ ‪ = y‬ﻓﻲ ‪ , y‬ﻭ ‪ = A‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،a‬ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪.Y = A + bX‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)6(g)4(Pwr‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y = a·x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a.............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b.................
PAGE 172
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫) ‪ "“List 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ"‪ ("List 26‬ﻝ‪ ."“Resid List‬ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 173
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(CALC)6(SET‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪) x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1Var XList ..........
PAGE 174
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(CALC)2(2VAR‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6-15‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ" ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .
PAGE 175
‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫))‪Σ (y – (ax + b‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (a + bx‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪+ bxi + c))2‬‬ ‫‪Σ (y – (ax‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (ax + bx + cx + d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪+ cxi2 + dxi + e))2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪Σ (y – (ax + bx‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (a + b ln x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (ln y – (ln a + bx‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
PAGE 176
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ”‪ “Coord‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Y-CAL‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(RUN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(PROB))K6(g)3(PROB‬ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪ 6(g)(fx-7400GIII‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ... {P(}/{Q(}/{R‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ })‪ {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪} ... {t‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ )‪{t(x‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )‪ P(t) ،Q(t) ،R(t‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ )‪ t(x‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 178
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,m‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،(RUN‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪K6(g)3(PROB‬‬ ‫))‪ 2(PROB‬ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪ (fx-7400GIII‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ (PROB‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3(PROB)*6(g)4(t() bga.f)w‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GIII: 2(PROB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ t‬ﻝ ‪ 160.5‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪–1.633855948 :‬‬ ‫)‪( –1.634‬‬ ‫‪4(t() bhf.f)w‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ t‬ﻝ ‪ 175.5‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪0.4963343361 :‬‬ ‫)‪( 0.496‬‬ ‫)‪1(P()a.ejg‬‬‫‪1(P()-b.gde)w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪0.638921 :‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪(63.
PAGE 179
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪K5(STAT)3(DIST)1(NORM‬‬ ‫‪1(NPd)!*( { )b,c,d‬‬ ‫‪!/( } ),b.f,c)w‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-32‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺻﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 180
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪TEST‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PRGM‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ‪ STAT‬ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪، Z‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ،t‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 182
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(CALC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ ... 6(DRAW‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫• )‪ ...
PAGE 183
‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪2(2-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ......... μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ............. sx1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ≠‪ .............0.5‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪-2 .‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪4(2-P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪p1>p2............‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ p1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ–‪ p‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ t‬ﻭ ‪ p‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ T‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ‪.‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪. t‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .............. sp‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻊ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ LinearReg u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ )‪ (x, y‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ a, b‬ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ .y = a + bx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،t‬ﻭ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ ‪ LinearReg‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.t‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ β & ρ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ [Res‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .....................CNTRB‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ χ2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ χ2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻣﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ χ2‬ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ /‬ﻻ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪3(CHI‬‬ ‫)‪2(2WAY‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪4(F‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ σ1≠σ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .............. x¯1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............. x¯2‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(F‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪5(ANOV‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ...............‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ‪) ANOVA‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ............... A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ .....................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .......... Save Res‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪* (22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ .............
PAGE 191
‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (A) 1‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، df‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، SS‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، SM‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، F‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .....(ERR) 2‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، df‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪.MS‬‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (A) 1‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،df‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،MS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،F‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (B) 2‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ df B‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪،MS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،F‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .......
PAGE 192
‫‪) ANOVA k‬ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (A‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ )‪ . (B‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B2‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ( ‪B‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪A‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪116 139‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪113‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫‪122‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪131 126‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪133‬‬ ‫‪A2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 193
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫‪6-36‬‬
PAGE 194
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ 95%‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫‪ k‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪4(2-P‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 197
‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ t‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪ t‬ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪2(2-S‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 198
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪• 5(DIST)1(NORM) ... ( 6-41‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ‪) t-‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪2(t) ... (6-43‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪) χ2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪3(CHI) ... (6-44‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪) F‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪4(F) ... (6-45‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪5(BINM) ... (6-46‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)1(POISN) ... (6-48‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)2(GEO) ... (6-49‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)3(H.GEO) ... (6-51‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ...
PAGE 199
‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ σ = 1‬ﻭ ‪ μ = 0‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪x-‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)1(NORM)2(NCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 200
‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99 :‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.
PAGE 201
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪t-‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)2(t)3(InvN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪ t-‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪df‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ )‪ (p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ(ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪.
PAGE 203
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪F‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)4(F)2(FCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪ (x‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)5(BINM)2(BCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ` (‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪)xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭ `‪) xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ ،`xInv‬ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 206
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)3(InvP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(GCd‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪)xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ ‪`xInv‬‬ ‫)ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ ، `xInv‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 209
‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)3(InvH‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ...... (Z‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )”‪ “≠ p0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ‪،‬‬ ‫”‪ “< p0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ‪ “> p0”،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫‪-2) p1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ........... (Z‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )”‪ “≠ p‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫”‪ “< p2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪“> p2” ، 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫‪-1) μ‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ...............
PAGE 211
‫‪X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ...............................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪) x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ (‬ ‫‪Y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ...............................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪) y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ........................... C-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ )‪ 0‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ–‪(1 > C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ...............................‬ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪) x‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ‪ ..............................‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) σ‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ(‪ ..............................‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪(σ > 0‬‬ ‫‪) μ‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ(‪ ..............................
PAGE 212
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬.
PAGE 213
‫‪ k‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﲔ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ(‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫'‪o + Z (α /2) · σ/‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ‪n‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ‪(o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ))‪x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= )‪(x1/n1 – x2/n2‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪+ Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫'‪o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/
PAGE 214
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫∞–‬ ‫∫‬ ‫∞‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﳝﲔ‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪t-‬‬ ‫∞‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ :μ‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ) ‪(μ > 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)··· ‪(x = 1, 2, 3,‬‬ ‫‪× N – MC n – x‬‬ ‫‪NC n‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫
PAGE 215
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(TVM‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.TVM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ TVM‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 216
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪TVM‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ 6(GRPH‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ‪ SFV ,SI ,PV‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }‪• {SI‬‬ ‫}ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }‪• {SFV‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ … }‪• {REPT‬‬ ‫}ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ … }‪• {GRPH‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 218
‫‪I %u‬‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ I %‬ﻣﻦ ‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫)‪i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1‬‬ ‫}‬ ‫)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ‪–1 × C/Y × 100...‬‬ ‫‪P/Y‬‬ ‫‪C/Y‬‬ ‫) ‪(1+ i‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ‪FV ...............‬‬ ‫{{‬ ‫= ‪I%‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ‪n...............‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪P/Y ..............‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪I% ............‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪C/Y..........
PAGE 219
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ{ … }‪• {n‬‬ ‫}ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ{ … }‪• {I%‬‬ ‫} ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ( … }‪• {PV‬‬ ‫} ﺩﻓﻊ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ( … }‪• {PMT‬‬ ‫} ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ( … }‪• {FV‬‬ ‫} ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ { … }‪• {AMT‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 221
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪} … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{‬ ‫}‪} … {GRPH‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 222
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i‬‬ ‫‪c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM2‬‬ ‫‪d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM1‬‬ ‫‪e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM2‬‬ ‫‪PM1‬‬ ‫) ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪BAL0 = PV (INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ I%‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ)‘‪(I%‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
PAGE 223
‫• }‪ } … { ΣINT‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{ PM2‬‬ ‫• } ‪ } … {ΣPRN‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{ PM2‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {CMPD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ {‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 224
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {'EFF‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {'APR‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ {‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 225
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(DAYS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)‪6(g)2(DAYS‬‬ ‫‪ .......... d1‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .......... d2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ .......... D‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ d1‬ﺍﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 226
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺿﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ) ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )‪ ، (SL‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ ، (FP‬ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ– ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ )‪ ، (SYD‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ – ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )‪. (DB‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.
PAGE 227
‫‪ u‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ‬ ‫)‪(DB‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ ‪j‬‬ ‫‪DBj‬‬ ‫‪ : RDVj‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪j‬‬ ‫‪ : I%‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫‪Y–1‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪100n‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫× ‪DB1 = PV‬‬ ‫‪RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1‬‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫‪100n‬‬ ‫× ) ‪DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV‬‬ ‫‪RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj‬‬ ‫)‪({Y–1}≠12‬‬ ‫‪DBn +1 = RDVn‬‬ ‫)‪({Y–1}≠12‬‬ ‫‪RDVn+1 = 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(DEPR‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 228
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {TABL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {GRPH‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ {‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫"ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" "ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 229
‫• ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫) ‪(k–1+B/D‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪RDV‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪YLD/100‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪–Σ‬‬ ‫‪k=1‬‬ ‫‪(1+‬‬ ‫) ‪(N–1+B/D‬‬ ‫‪CST = PRC + INT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪YLD/100‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫– = ‪PRC‬‬ ‫‪(1+‬‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫– = ‪INT‬‬ ‫)‪(YLD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(BOND‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)4(BOND‬‬ ‫‪ ..........
PAGE 230
‫‪ MEMO‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪MEMO‬‬ ‫• ﹼ‬ ‫‪ ....PRD‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ d1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪d2‬‬ ‫‪ ......... N‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪ ......... A‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ ......... B‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(-D-A‬‬ ‫‪ ........ D‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ MEMO‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ )‪ (CPD‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ .
PAGE 231
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PRGM‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪, spaces, [, ],‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 232
‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 10‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 10‬‬ ‫‪baw‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 15‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 15‬‬ ‫‪bfw‬‬ ‫‪w*1‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺍﻭ ‪ (RUN‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪>" w‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" ‪.Prog‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ \ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 233
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !J(PRGM‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {COM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ {‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {CTL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ {‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {JUMP‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ {‬ ‫• }?{‪ ... {^}/‬ﺍﻣﺮ } ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ { ‪ } /‬ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ {‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CLR}/{DISP‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ} ﻣﺴﺢ { ‪ } /‬ﻋﺮﺽ {‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {REL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ {‬ ‫• }‪} ... {I/O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ‪ /‬ﲢﻜﻢ ‪{I/O‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {:‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪ } ...
PAGE 234
‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ"‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ"‪ .‬ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺷﺊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 235
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪*1.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(SRC‬ﺍﻭ ‪ w‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪*2.‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ *2‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 236
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ ﺑـ ‪.OCTA‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)1(SRC‬ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)1(SRC‬‬ ‫)‪j(O)I(C)/(T‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 237
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫_‪_r‬‬ ‫_‪_t‬‬ ‫_‪_s‬‬ ‫_‪_q‬‬ ‫_‪_p‬‬ ‫_‪_x‬‬ ‫_‪_d‬‬ ‫_‪_+‬‬ ‫_‪_-‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫"‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫×‬ ‫÷‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) 'Program Mode :RUN‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(RUN‬‬ ‫‪) 'Program Mode :BASE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(BASE‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .
PAGE 238
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫"ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .
PAGE 239
‫‪ .5‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪8-12 ....................................................Break‬‬ ‫‪8-19 ................................ CloseComport38k‬‬ ‫‪8-15 ............................................. ClrGraph‬‬ ‫‪8-16 .................................................. ClrList‬‬ ‫‪8-16 .................................................. ClrMat‬‬ ‫‪8-16 ................................................ ClrText‬‬ ‫‪8-16 .................................................. ClrVct‬‬ ‫‪8-16 ..........
PAGE 240
‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫? )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ">ﻃﻠﺐ<" ‪>,‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ?‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪? → A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ "?" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "?>ﻃﻠﺐ<" ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 255‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 241
‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)‪(COM‬‬ ‫‪If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪ Then-‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ If-‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪Else-‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ If-‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )‪ .(0‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪ IfEnd-‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ Then-‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 242
‫‪Do~LpWhile‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪LpWhile‬‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )‪،(0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.LpWhile-‬‬ ‫• ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،LpWhile-‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 243
‫‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(RUN‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪"_ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" ‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪Prog "ABC"_ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 244
‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫)‪(JUMP‬‬ ‫‪Dsz‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ ‪0‬‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< ‪Dsz‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪θ ،r ،Z‬‬ ‫]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ ‪ : Dsz B‬ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ B‬ﺑـ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 245
‫⇒ )ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 246
‫‪ClrList‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ‪ClrList‬‬ ‫‪ClrList‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ 1 :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪Ans ،26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫‪ClrMat‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 247
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ DrawFTG-Con‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‪،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ DrawFTG-Plt‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawGraph‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 248
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫‪PlotPhase‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ x-‬ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪.y-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪>,
PAGE 249
‫‪Locate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 250
‫‪Receive38k / Send38k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 38‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ< ‪Send38k‬‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ<‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ<‬ ‫‪Receive38k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ OpenComport38k‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ CloseComport38k‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 251
‫(‪Exp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>"[)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪Exp‬‬ ‫(‪Exp'Str‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>[)] :‬ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ< ‪>,‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(‪Exp'Str‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )‪ ،(Yn, r, Xt, Yt, X‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ )‪an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2,‬‬ ‫‪ (cn, cn+1, cn+2‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ (fn‬ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ )>ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(‪.
PAGE 252
‫(‪StrMid‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ‪ n-‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻝ‪ m-‬ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ n ،0 < n < 9999‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>", n [,m)] :‬ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪StrMid‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ "‪ "m‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ ‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪StrRight‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ n‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ n ،0 < n < 9999‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>", n[)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪StrRight‬‬ ‫(‪StrRotate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ ‪.
PAGE 253
‫‪ k‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪RclCapt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‪ 1 :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ< ‪RclCapt‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.
PAGE 254
‫‪ u‬ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪(Swap‬‬ ‫ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻒ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫_‪Swap A, 2, 3‬‬ ‫‪Mat A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪(`Row‬‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 255
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪4‬‬ ‫)‪(Row+‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫_‪Row+ A, 2, 3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪Mat A‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 256
‫>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪>, ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪PxlOn‬‬ ‫>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪PxlOff‬‬ ‫>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪PxlChg‬‬ ‫>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪PxlTest‬‬ ‫">ﻧﺺ<" ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪Text‬‬ ‫>ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< ‪>,‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< ‪Text‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchThick‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchBroken‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchDot‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchNormal‬‬ ‫>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪>,
PAGE 257
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪DrawFTG-Con_ :‬‬ ‫_‪1 → F Start‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪DrawFTG-Plt_ :‬‬ ‫_‪5 → F End‬‬ ‫_‪1 → F pitch‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫_‪DispF-Tbl‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ‪ ...
PAGE 258
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﹸﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﳌﹸﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ< ‪ ... File‬ﺭﻗﻢ‪ 1 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 259
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ‪.xy‬‬ ‫_ ‪S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳋﻂ ‪ ،xy‬ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ "‪ "Scatter‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑـ"‪."xyLine‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ‪S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 260
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫]‪DrawDistNorm , [,σ, μ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 4151‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ μ = 0‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 261
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫]‪DrawDistChi , , [df‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1 4153‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪× e‬‬ ‫‪–1‬‬ ‫‪df‬‬ ‫‪df‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪× x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪df‬‬ ‫‪Γ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ DrawDistChi‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ Lower < x < Upper‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 262
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪LinearReg(ax+b) List1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪(Frequency‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(YList) y-‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(XList) x-‬‬ ‫‪1 416611‬‬ ‫* ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ............. LinearReg(ax+b‬ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(ax+b‬‬ ‫)‪ ............. LinearReg(a+bx‬ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(a+bx‬‬ ‫‪ Med-Med .................. Med-MedLine‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ............................ QuadReg‬ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪ ...........................
PAGE 263
‫(‪ :NormCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪NormCD(Lower, Upper[, σ, μ)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،ZLow‬ﻭ ‪ZUp‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،ZLow‬ﻭ ‪ .ZUp‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟـ ‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :InvNormCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ( ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 264
‫(‪ :ChiCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪) χ2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ChiCD(Lower,Upper,df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :InvChiCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪) χ2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ‪.p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪InvChiCD(p,df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .p‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ListAns) Ans‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ p‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.
PAGE 265
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ‬ ‫(‪ :PoissonPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪PoissonPD(x, μ[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :PoissonCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪PoissonCD(X,μ[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ .X‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ X‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.
PAGE 266
‫(‪ :InvHypergeoCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪InvHypergeoCD(p, n, M, N[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .p‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ X‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ p‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ TEST‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﳊﺠﺔ "‪ "μ condition‬ﻟﻸﻣﺮ‪.
PAGE 267
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪ :OneSampleTTest‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ 1-‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.t-‬‬ ‫‪OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, o, sx, n‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, List[, Freq‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ t, p, o, sx, n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.5‬‬ ‫‪ :TwoSampleTTest‬ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ t-‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ‪.
PAGE 268
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ F, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.8‬‬ ‫‪ANOVA u‬‬ ‫‪:OneWayANOVA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ‪ ANOVA‬ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OneWayANOVA List1, List2‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (A‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.
PAGE 269
‫‪ u‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪."(TVM‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:Smpl_SI‬‬ ‫)‪Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Smpl_SFV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ P/Y‬ﻭ ‪ C/Y‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ P/Y=12‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 270
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.PM2‬‬ ‫‪:Amt_BAL‬‬ ‫)‪Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Amt_INT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Amt_PRN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Amt_ΣINT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Amt_ΣPRN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ ‪.PM1‬‬ ‫)‪Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ ‪.PM1‬‬ ‫)‪Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 271
‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬.7 .
PAGE 272
hp [hp] [ft•lbf/s] ft•lbf/s [Btu/min] Btu/min sinh sinh_ cosh cosh_ tanh tanh_ sinh–1 sinh–1_ cosh–1 cosh–1_ tanh–1 tanh–1_ X! ! nPr P nCr C Ran# RAND Ran#_ Int RanInt#( Norm RanNorm#( Bin RanBin#( List RanList#( P( P( Q( Q( R( R( t( t( Abs Abs_ Int Int_ Frac Frac_ Rnd Rnd Intg Intg_ RndFi RndFix( GCD GCD( LCM LCM( MOD MOD( MOD•E MOD_Exp( ° r g Pol( Rec( 'DMS m µ n p f k M G T P E StoPict_ RclPict_ fn _And_ _Or_ Not_ Xor_ RclCapt_ Smpl_SI( Smpl_SFV( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_I%( ° r g HYP PROB NUM ANGL ° ’ ’’ Pol(
PAGE 273
b2 b2 c0 c0 c1 c1 c2 c2 anStart anSt bnStart bnSt cnStart cnSt R_Result Reslt Sim_Result S-Rlt Sim_Coef S-Cof Ply_Result P-Rlt Ply_Coef P-Cof n n I% I% PV PV PMT PMT FV FV P/Y P/Y C/Y C/Y EQUA TVM Str_ Str !J (PRGM) ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ 3 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬2 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬ If_ Then_ Else_ IfEnd For_ _To_ _Step_ Next While_ WhileEnd Do LpWhile_ Prog_ Return Break Stop Lbl_ Goto_ If Then Else I-End For To Step Next Whle WEnd Do Lp-W Prog Rtrn Brk Stop Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz_ Dsz_ Me
PAGE 274
Graph_ ∫ G-∫dx Y> Graph_Y> Y< Graph_Y< Graph_Yt Yt Graph_Ys Ys X> Graph_X> X< Graph_X< Graph_Xt Xt Graph_Xs Xs Plot Plot_ PlotOn_ Pl-On PlotOff_ Pl-Off PlotChg_ Pl-Chg Line Line F-Line_ F-Line Circle_ Vertical_ Horizontal_ Text_ On PxlOn_ Off PxlOff_ Chg PxlChg_ PxlTest( SketchNormal_ ⎯ — SketchThick_ ····· SketchBroken_ ······ SketchDot_ S-L-Dot G-Connect LINE Crcl Vert Hztl Text PIXL 4 (MENU) ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ d h b o Neg_ Not_ and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct 3 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬2 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬ d h b o N
PAGE 275
1-S OneSampleZTest_ 2-S TwoSampleZTest_ 1-P OnePropZTest_ 2-P TwoPropZTest_ 1-S OneSampleTTest_ 2-S TwoSampleTTest_ REG LinRegTTest_ GOF ChiGOFTest_ ChiTest_ 2-WAY TwoSampleFTest_ 1-W OneWayANOVA_ 2-W TwoWayANOVA_ p p z z t t Chi χ2 F F p̂ p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 1 p̂ 2 p̂ 2 df df se se r r r2 r2 pa pa Fa Fa Adf Adf SSa SSa MSa MSa pb pb Fb Fb Bdf Bdf SSb SSb MSb MSb pab pab Fab Fab ABdf ABdf SSab SSab MSab MSab Edf Edf SSe SSe MSe MSe Left Left Right Right p̂ p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 1 p̂ 2 p̂ 2 df df p p xInv xInv x1Inv x1Inv x2Inv
PAGE 276
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-6‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻲ )_( ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 277
.‫" ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ‬" ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ f femto 7 7 m m p pico 8 8 n n n nano 9 9 o o μ micro : : p p m milli ; ; q q k kilo < < r r M Mega = = s s G Giga > > t t T Tera ? ? u u P Peta @ @ v v E Exa A A w w ^ Disps B B x x ↵ (CR) C C y y → -> D D z z E Exp E E { { ≤ <= F F | | ≠ <> G G } } ≥ >= H H ~ ˜ ⇒ => I I Pol( Pol( f1 f1 J J sin sin f2 f2 K
PAGE 278
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Int Int ∑xy Sigmaxy ReP ReP Not Not Plot Plot ImP ImP ^ ^ Line Line d/dx( d/dx( ×  Lbl Lbl d2/dx2( d^2/dx^2( or or Fix Fix Solve( Solve( ! ! Sci Sci Σ( Sigma( r rad Dsz Dsz FMin( FMin( minY minY Isz Isz FMax( FMax( minX minX Factor Factor Seq( Seq( n Statn ViewWindow ViewWindow Min( Min( sinh−1 sinh^−1 Goto Goto Mean( Mean( cosh−1 cosh^−1 Prog Prog Median( Median( t
PAGE 279
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ List4 List4 Σbn+2 Sigmabn+2 MSab MSab List5 List5 Σcn+ Sigmacn+2 [ns] [ns] List6 List6 Int÷ Int/ [μs] [micros] Q1 Q1 Rmdr Rmdr [ms] [ms] Q3 Q3 Fa Fa [s] [s] x1 x1 n1 n1 [min] [min] y1 y1 n2 n2 [h] [h] x2 x2 x̄1 x-bar1 [day] [day] y2 y2 x̄2 x-bar2 [week] [week] x3 x3 sx1 sx1 [yr] [yr] y3 y3 sx2 sx2 [s-yr] [s-yr] Vct Vct sp Sxp [t-yr] [t-yr] logab( logab( p̂ p-hat [C] [Centigrade] Rn
PAGE 280
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ [yd] [yd] IfEnd IfEnd [fath] [fath] For For Med-MedLine [rd] [rd] To To QuadReg QuadReg [mile] [mile] Step Step CubicReg CubicReg [nmile] [n_mile] Next Next QuartReg QuartReg [acre] [acre] While While LogReg LogReg [ha] [ha] WhileEnd WhileEnd ExpReg(a·e^bx) ExpReg(ae^bx) [cm2] [cm^2] Do Do PowerReg PowerReg [m2] [m^2] LpWhile LpWhile S-Gph1 S-Gph1 [km2] [km^2] Return Return S-Gph2 S-
PAGE 281
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ VarRange DerivOn DerivOn DrawDistT DrawDistT Q1Q3TypeOnData Q1Q3TypeOnData LocusOn LocusOn DrawDistChi DrawDistChi SketchNormal SketchNormal ΣdispOn SigmadispOn DrawDistF DrawDistF SketchThick SketchThick GSelOn GSelOn None None SketchBroken SketchBroken TSelOn TSelOn StickLength StickLength SketchDot SketchDot DSelOn DSelOn StickHoriz StickHoriz anType anType RSelOn RSelOn IneqTypeOr IneqTypeOr an+1
PAGE 282
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Smpl_SI( Smpl_SI( Smpl_SFV( Smpl_SFV( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_FV( Cmpd_FV( Cash_NPV( Cash_NPV( Cash_IRR( Cash_IRR( Cash_PBP( Cash_PBP( Cash_NFV( Cash_NFV( Amt_BAL( Amt_BAL( Amt_INT( Amt_INT( Amt_PRN( Amt_PRN( Amt_ΣINT( Amt_SigmaINT( Amt_ΣPRN( Amt_SigmaPRN( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_APR( Cnvt_APR( Cost( Cost( Sell( Sell( Margin( Margin( PmtEnd PmtEnd PmtBgn PmtBgn Bond_PRC( Bond_PRC( Bond_YLD( Bo
PAGE 283
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﻳﹸﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ )‪ B (2, 3, 5, 7....‬ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.
PAGE 284
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ ‪. X‬‬ ‫‪ :Y1‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y2‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y4‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y5‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻝ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ ‪Y4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 285
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S • SHT‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S • SHT‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ S • SHT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ ”‪.“SHEET‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻄﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 286
‫• }‪ ... {DEL‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪) DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪{ROW}/{COL}/{ALL‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {INS‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪) INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪{ROW}/{COL‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CLR‬ﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {GRPH‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ GRPH‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(STAT‬‬ ‫• }‪{GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3}/{SEL}/{SET‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CALC‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪) CALC‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(STAT‬‬ ‫• }‪{1VAR}/{2VAR}/{REG}/{SET‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 287
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 2(FILE)1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪f‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،S • SHT‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(FILE)3(SV • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 288
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻛﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪) CSV‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺻﻒ ‪ ،2‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ (3‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ 26‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪ 999‬ﺻﻒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "‪."Invalid Data Size‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 289
‫‪Auto Calc u‬‬ ‫‪ Auto Calc‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) S • SHT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-34‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Auto Calc‬ﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Auto Calc‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .
PAGE 290
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . f‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ،C1‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻣﻦ ‪ C1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ .(C999‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪C1:C999‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ A‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 1‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 291
‫‪) k‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 292
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ‪.‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،sin30، A1×2 ،7+3‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=(ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ sdaw‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) 0.5‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Deg‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 293
‫• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(EXE‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ w‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ )”( ‪ .
PAGE 294
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C2‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C3‬ﻭ ‪ .C4‬ﻭ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪C2‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2(EDIT)2(COPY)c1(PASTE)c1(PASTE)J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ‬ ‫”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9-11‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻲ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ"‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻩ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(Z‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﻪ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ .(999‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ .
PAGE 295
‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﺼﻘﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻚ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫)‪ ($‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻘﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ )‪ ($‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ )‪ ،($A1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ )‪ ،(A$1‬ﻭ ﺻﻒ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ )‪.
PAGE 296
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ( ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ =A1+5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ B1‬ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .B2‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﻮ ‪ A1‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﹼﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 297
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ‪ B1, B2، B3‬ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ . B1‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 298
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9-6‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 299
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،B‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،B2:D4، B10:D20‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪.4(INS‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.J ،‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(ROW‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻭ )‪ 2(COL‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 300
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫(‪CellMean‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪5(CEL)3(Mean) :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪[)] :‬ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪:‬ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‪CellMean‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪=CellMean(A3:C5) :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪.A3:C5‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫(‪CellMedian‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫(‪CellSum‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫(‪CellProd‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 301
‫‪ .4‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻹﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ ‪.y-‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 302
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪6(g)1(GRPH)6(SET‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )‪ StatGraph1‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 303
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻝ ‪ ،XCellRange، YCellRange‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ )‪1(CELL) 2(CELL‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ 1(:‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻥ )‪ (:‬ﺑﲔ ﺇﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﺍﻭ ‪.
PAGE 304
‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1VarXCell‬ﻭ ‪2VarXCell‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 1VarFreq‬ﻭ ‪2VarYCell‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2VarFreq‬‬ ‫• ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 305
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫}‪{CALC} - {2VAR‬‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6-16‬‬ ‫}‪{CALC} - {REG‬‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6-17‬‬ ‫}‪{CALC} - {SET‬‬ ‫“ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9-19‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪S • SHT‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 306
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ERROR‬ﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 307
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫)‪ Vct Z‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(Vct A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،6(g)4(RCL)4(VCT‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 308
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .eActivity‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫"ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 309
‫ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ .........................‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،RUN • MAT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪ .......................
PAGE 310
‫• }‪ ...{'MAT‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(10-7‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10-7‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{'LIST‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10-7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• }‪ ...{TEXT‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{CHAR‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{A↔a‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.(a‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{MATH‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪) MATH‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 311
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(OPEN‬ﺍﻭ *‪.w‬‬ ‫* ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.3(DEL‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ " ﺣﺬﻑ ‪eActivity‬؟"‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ)‪.4(SRC‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 312
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “TEXT‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.F3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ”‪“TEXT‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ “CALC‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ F3‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(CALC‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 313
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ eActivity‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(1-3‬ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 314
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ }‪ {'MAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .RUN • MAT‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(2-38‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ RUN • MAT‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 315
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .eActivity‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ" ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 316
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(STRP‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10-8‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”‪) “Graph‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 317
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،eActivity‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (‪. !a‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.
PAGE 318
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‪.
PAGE 319
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ( ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ”‪ “g2e‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ))‪(1(FILE)2(SV-AS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ”‪) “g1e‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ”‪ “g2e‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ) ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ OS 2.
PAGE 320
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪1(FILE)4(CAPA‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 321
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﱠﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺗﲔ‪.
PAGE 322
‫‪ k‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ fx-9860GIII‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،fx-9750GIII‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MEMORY‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 323
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 324
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ*‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ g2m.‬ﺃﻭ ‪*g1m.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ "‪ ".g1m‬ﺃﻭ "‪.".g2m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ )ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ )] [(‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 325
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 5(RN • F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، Z‬ﻭ {‪ 0 ,~ ,‘ ,} ,‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪، 9‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ"‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ" ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 326
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (g‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻣﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MEMORY‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 327
‫‪ u‬ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ " ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ" ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 328
‫‪ k‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.6(DEL‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 329
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ "‪"S‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪3(SRC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "S‬ﻟﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "S‬ﻣﻈﻠﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 330
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "!‪ "Complete‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "Memory Full‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 331
‫‪ k‬ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MEMORY‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 5(OPT‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "!‪ "Complete‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ‪.
PAGE 332
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪} ... 1‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{‬ ‫•)‬ ‫(‪} ... 2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{‬ ‫•)‬ ‫• )‪} ... 3(LANG‬ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 4(VER‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 5(RSET‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 6(g)5(OS‬ﲢﺪﻳﺚ{*‬ ‫* ‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 333
‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ LANG‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(LANG‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 1(SEL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺍﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪(fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 334
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(NAME‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 5(RSET‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ‪.
PAGE 335
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 336
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .LINK‬ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {TRAN‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {RECV‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ {‬ ‫• }‪} ... *{EXAM‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... *{CABL‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 337
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 1(On‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ )‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ"‪ .
PAGE 338
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ *USB‬ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺮﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 339
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﶈﺮﹼﻙ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﺮﹼﻙ )‪ ،E, F, G‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ" ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 340
@MainMem ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ GMEMxx.g2m LISTxx.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬LISTxx.g2m LISTANS.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬LISTANS.g2m FILEx.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬FILEx.g2m MATANS.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬MATANS.g2m MATx.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬MATx.g2m VCTANS.g2m VCTx.g2m <‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬.g1m <‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬.txt <‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬.g1m ‫ﺃﻭ‬ <‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬.g2m VMEMx.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬VMEMx.g2m PICTxx.g1m CAPTxx.g1m STRINGxx.g2m ALPHAMEM.g1m ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ALPHAMEM.g2m RECUR.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬RECUR.g2m SETUP.g2m CONICS.g1m DYNA MEM.g1m ‫ﺃﻭ‬ DYNA MEM.g2m EQUATION.g1m ‫ﺃﻭ‬ EQUATION.g2m FINANCE.g2m STAT.g1m ‫ ﺃﻭ‬STAT.
PAGE 341
‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‬ ‫‪ @MainMem‬ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ ‪ .@MainMem‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ‪ @MainMem‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 342
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13-3‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ‪،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 343
‫‪ .5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﲢﺖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ \‪.@MainMem\PROGRAM‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ txt‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ASCII‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ANSI‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13-4‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 344
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪*.SB-62‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.SB-62‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـ ‪.3PIN‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.LINK‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ,4(CABL‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.
PAGE 345
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(TRAN‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SEL‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CRNT‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪{*1‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺎﺭﺓ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SEL‬ﺍﻭ )‪ 2(CRNT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 346
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 347
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪SETUP‬‬ ‫‪STAT‬‬ ‫>‪*1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ‪*1‬‬ ‫‪TABLE‬‬ ‫>‪
PAGE 348
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ fx-9860GIII‬ﺃﻭ ‪ fx-9750GIII‬ﺃﻭ ‪ fx-7400GIII‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 349
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ fx-9860GIII‬ﺃﻭ ‪ fx-9750GIII‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪fx-7400GIII‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ fx-9860GIII :‬ﻭ‪fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪fx-7400GIII :‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ )'( ﺃﻭ )‪ ،pi (π‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 350
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ ‪.(YP-100‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪PRGM‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ‪ .
PAGE 351
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ‪PYTHON‬‬ ‫)ﻟـ ‪ ،fx-9860GIII‬ﻭ‪fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪ .Python‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،Python‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ!‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،MicroPython Version 1.9.4‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻪ ﻟﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪ MicroPython‬ﻋﻦ ‪ Python‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 352
‫‪k‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪.OCTA‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ )‪ (S‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ )‪(V‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ )‪ (A‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 353
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺟ ﹺﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺺ ‪.py‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) PYTHON‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14-9‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﱠ ﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟ ﹺﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪!e(CATALOG)6(CTGY)d(math)((I)(import math‬‬ ‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪import math‬‬ ‫)=(‪a5(A↔a)v(A)!.
PAGE 354
‫‪k‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪SHELL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (RUN)2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SHELL‬ﻓﻲ ‪،PYTHON‬‬ ‫ﺴﻤﻰ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ‪ .py‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗ ﹸ ﱠ‬ ‫‪ ."SHELL‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺳﻄ ﹴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣ ﹴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،SHELL‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) "SHELL‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 355
‫‪k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫• }‪ … {A↔a‬ﻳﺒ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• }‪{FILE‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫• }‪ … {SAVE‬ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫• }‪ … {SV • AS‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪py‬‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 356
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PYTHON‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪(.
PAGE 357
‫ﻣﻬﻢ!‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ()log ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪) e ،‬ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ pi‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .math‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ *.math‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14-10‬ﻭ"ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪) "math‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-12‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ‪ import‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ‪ from‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ "‪ "math.‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 358
‫‪k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ( ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ }‪ {COM‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 359
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪if...else‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(ifelse)2(COM)1(g)6‬‬ ‫• ﻳﹸﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ‪ ،if...else‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻁ ‪.if‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .
PAGE 360
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (INPUT)1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪All‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PYTHON‬‬ ‫‪Built-in‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .
PAGE 361
‫‪k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ )‪(import‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PYTHON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Python‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ math‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.random‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ )‪ (import‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪import‬‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ< ‪import‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ (py‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ >ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ<‪.‬‬ ‫‪> import ‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ< ‪from‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ* ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ >ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ<‪.
PAGE 362
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪math‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(SHELL)4‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪ (CATALOG)e‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (CTGY)6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(math)d‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻧﻔﱢﺬ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) w(M)h‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ "‪("math.‬‬ ‫!‪) w(C)I(CATALOG)e‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ")(‪("ceil‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.wc.b‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،math‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ "ceil()" math‬ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 363
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SHELL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.SHELL‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬ ‫)>>> ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ(‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬ ‫)"|" ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪SHELL‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 127‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺪ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ >>> ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ‪.
PAGE 364
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪SHELL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-15‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .c‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) SHELL‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 365
‫‪k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ :1‬ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪(2+3) × 102 = 500‬‬ ‫‪(c+d)*baxw‬‬ ‫‪2+3 × (4+5) = 29‬‬ ‫‪c+d*(e+f)w‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ -‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ -‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 366
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ input‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪PYTHON‬‬ ‫‪ input‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ‪ Python‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪.py‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪input‬‬ ‫‪])input‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪ ،py‬ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ‪] input‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ ،SHELL‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )”( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ )’( ﻟـ ]ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[‪.
PAGE 367
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ SHELL‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﺺ ‪ py‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪ .py‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪SHELL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪SHELL ‬‬ ‫‪" Initialized‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺺ ‪py‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺺ ‪py‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪py‬‬ ‫‪k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪py‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 368
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(SRC)4(g)6‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺺ ‪ py‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ ."Not Found‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 369
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪،py‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪ e‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) py‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 370
‫‪ .6‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ"‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 371
‫‪ .7‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 372
‫‪ u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ )‪ (A‬ﻭ)‪ (B‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PYTHON‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PYTHON‬‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ‪ ASCII‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ UTF-8‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ASCII‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،ASCII‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .PYTHON‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 373
‫‪ .8‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "if... else...‬ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫))"=‪a=int(input("a‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪.py‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.a‬‬ ‫‪if a<5:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ a‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪،5‬‬ ‫)"‪print("a<5‬‬ ‫‪else:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪.
PAGE 374
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ :2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ import‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ<‪>.‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ<‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪import math‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ math‬ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P=math.pi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ‪ ،pi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.math‬‬ ‫)‪print(P‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 375
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪def f(x,y,z):‬‬ ‫‪if x>0:‬‬ ‫‪t=x+y+z‬‬ ‫‪else:‬‬ ‫‪t=x-y-z‬‬ ‫)‪return(t‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ‪ ،f‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ،x‬ﻭ‪ ،y‬ﻭ‪.z‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪،0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ t‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪.x+y+z‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪،(0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ t‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪.x-y-z‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪ py‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﺺ ‪ py‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 376
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ!‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ py‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SHELL‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ SHELL‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ *،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ py‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 377
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪Syntax‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫‪Ma ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Go ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 378
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ‬ ‫‪Memory‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Argument‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﳊﺠﺔ‪.
PAGE 379
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪Can’t Simplify‬‬ ‫!‪Can’t Solve‬‬ ‫‪Adjust initial‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ 'Simp‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) 'Simp‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ,(2-23‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ‪.4/8‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪value or‬‬ ‫‪bounds. Then‬‬ ‫‪try again.
PAGE 380
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Invalid Data‬‬ ‫‪Size‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 256‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪fx-9750GIII‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ fx-9750GIII‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 381
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪File System‬‬ ‫‪ERROR*1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫"ﻫﺎﻡ!" ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫"ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12-3‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 382
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪sinx‬‬ ‫‪cosx‬‬ ‫‪tanx‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪(DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)°‬‬ ‫‪(RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad‬‬ ‫‪sin–1x‬‬ ‫‪cos–1x‬‬ ‫‪tan–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪sinhx‬‬ ‫‪coshx‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 230.9516564‬‬ ‫‪tanhx‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 ×10100‬‬ ‫‪sinh–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪cosh–1x‬‬ ‫‪1 < x < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪logx‬‬ ‫‪Inx‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100 < x < 100‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪< x < 230.
PAGE 383
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫‪|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪0 < b, c‬‬ ‫⎯←‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 107‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪±1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪x > 0:‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10‬‬ ‫‪< ylogx < 100‬‬ ‫‪x=0:y>0‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫–––– ‪x < 0 : y = n,‬‬ ‫‪2n+1‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ‪(m, n‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫)‪^(xy‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫"‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ؛‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ‪.
PAGE 384
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )‪ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )‪ (Examination Mode‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 385
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻪ ) ( ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ a-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 386
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 387
MicroPython license information The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2013-2017 Damien P.
PAGE 388
E-CON3 Application (English) ( fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII)
PAGE 389
Important! • Do not install Add-in E-CON2 on a calculator that has E-CON3 installed. Doing so may cause operational problems. • All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures. • The E-CON3 application is designed to get the most out of the measurement functions of the CASIO EA-200 Data Logger.
PAGE 390
1-1 E-CON3 Overview 1 E-CON3 Overview • From the Main Menu, select E-CON3 to enter the E-CON3 Mode. E-CON3 Main Menu • The “E-CON3 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data sampling using a Data Logger. • 1(SET) ......... Displays a screen for setting up a Data Logger. • 2(MEM)........ Displays a screen for saving Data Logger setup data under a file name. • 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
PAGE 391
2-1 Using the Setup Wizard 2 Using the Setup Wizard This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the Data Logger setup quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear. If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1. k Setup Wizard Parameters Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three Data Logger basic sampling parameters using an interactive wizard format.
PAGE 392
2-2 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard Before getting started... • Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to store the setup for later sampling. • See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON3 Application) for information about procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup.
PAGE 393
2-3 Using the Setup Wizard If you select this sensor/option: Go here for more information: [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] “Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling” on page 2-4 [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only] [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Gate] “To configure a setup for Photogate alone” on page 2-5 [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] “To configure a setup for Photogate and
PAGE 394
2-4 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling (EA-200 only) When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis).
PAGE 395
2-5 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup Connection of a Vernier or CMA Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors. u To configure a setup for Photogate alone 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. • This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 2. If you are using a Vernier Photogate alone, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
PAGE 396
2-6 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. 2. This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 3. If you are using a Vernier Photogate with Pulley, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] [Pulley]. When the “Select Channel” dialog box appears, advance to step 4 of this procedure. If you are using a CMA Photogate with Pulley, select [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
PAGE 397
2-7 Using the Setup Wizard 6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input. • Note that the angle unit is always radians. • Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5. 7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function. • This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker. 8.
PAGE 398
2-8 Using the Setup Wizard 13. Press w. • This displays a screen like the one shown below. 14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do. To change the output frequency and try again: Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above steps from step 10. To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again: Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from step 8.
PAGE 399
3-1 Using Advanced Setup 3 Using Advanced Setup Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can adjust to configure the Data Logger setup that suits your particular needs. The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using Advanced Setup to configure a Data Logger setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial default values.
PAGE 400
3-2 Using Advanced Setup • d(Trigger)........Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information. • e(Graph) .........Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup” on page 3-13 for more information. • You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”. 6.
PAGE 401
3-3 Using Advanced Setup k Channel Setup The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). u To configure Channel Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel). • This displays the Channel Setup screen. Currently selected channel Channel Setup Screen 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting you want to change. 3.
PAGE 402
3-4 Using Advanced Setup • From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select [Gate] or [Pulley]. [Gate] ................Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone. [Pulley] ..............Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a smart pulley. 5(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel. • Mic Channel (EA-200 only) For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
PAGE 403
3-5 Using Advanced Setup k Sample Setup The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling. u To configure Sample Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample). • This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can select the sampling mode. 2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
PAGE 404
3-6 Using Advanced Setup 3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press 1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval. • The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting. If this sampling mode is selected: This is the allowable setting range: Realtime 0.
PAGE 405
3-7 Using Advanced Setup 6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w. • This returns to the Advanced Setup menu. Note • Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert automatically to their initial defaults.
PAGE 406
3-8 Using Advanced Setup k Trigger Setup You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”, which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen. The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
PAGE 407
3-9 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
PAGE 408
3-10 Using Advanced Setup 3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was selected in step 2. If this is the trigger source: Do this next: [EXE] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu. Count Down Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown start time” below. CH1 Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
PAGE 409
3-11 Using Advanced Setup u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5). 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup (page 3-3) Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor 3.
PAGE 410
3-12 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source. 1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 2. Press one of the function keys described below. To specify this Photogate status: Press this key: Photogate closed 1(Close) Photogate open 2(Open) 3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”. 4. Press one of the function keys described below.
PAGE 411
3-13 Using Advanced Setup k Graph Setup Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off. u To configure Graph Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph). • This displays the Graph Setup screen. Currently selected item Graph Setup Screen 2.
PAGE 412
3-14 Using Advanced Setup 5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below. To specify this real-time scrolling setting: Press this key: Real-time scrolling on 1(On) Real-time scrolling off 2(Off) 6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
PAGE 413
4-1 Using a Custom Probe 4 Using a Custom Probe You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with a Data Logger. Important! • The sensors (CASIO, Vernier, CMA) that appear on the list during Channel Setup (page 3-3) are E-CON3 mode standard sensors. If you want to use a sensor that is not included in the list, configure custom probe settings. • A sensor with an output voltage in the range of 0 to 5 volts can be configured with E-CON3 as a custom probe.
PAGE 414
4-2 Using a Custom Probe 5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E. • This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”. 6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup. • To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want. (1) Slope Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
PAGE 415
4-3 Using a Custom Probe k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe setup based on two actual samples. Important! • Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose measurement values are known. • When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4.
PAGE 416
4-4 Using a Custom Probe 4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value. 5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press w. • This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
PAGE 417
4-5 Using a Custom Probe k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual sample using the applicable custom probe. u To zero adjust a custom probe 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to zero adjust to CH1 of the Data Logger. 2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
PAGE 418
4-6 Using a Custom Probe k Managing Custom Probe Setups Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups. u To edit a custom probe setup 1. Display the Custom Probe List. 2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit. • Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want. 3. Press 2(EDIT). • This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
PAGE 419
5-1 Using the MULTIMETER Mode 5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that Data Logger MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation. u To use the MULTIMETER Mode 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable Data Logger channels. 2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using. 3.
PAGE 420
6-1 Using Setup Memory 6 Using Setup Memory Creating Data Logger setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
PAGE 421
6-2 Using Setup Memory 2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM). If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting the setup name. 3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name. 4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99). • If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen, this saves the setup and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen.
PAGE 422
6-3 Using Setup Memory u To recall a setup and use it for sampling Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled. 5. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 6.
PAGE 423
6-4 Using Setup Memory u To delete setup data 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want. 3. Press 4(DEL). 4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the setup. • To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No). u To recall setup data Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area.
PAGE 424
7-1 Using Program Converter 7 Using Program Converter Program Converter converts a Data Logger setup you configured using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2 *1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information about how to use a converted program.
PAGE 425
7-2 Using Program Converter 2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name. Note Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one below. • Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series • Associated Data Logger: EA-200 • Calibration: None • Password: None If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3 through 7 and go directly to step 8.
PAGE 426
7-3 Using Program Converter 5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key operations to configure the desired setting.
PAGE 427
7-4 Using Program Converter k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on the CFX-9850) on the E-CON3, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program. Conversion can be performed using the program converter. EA-200 Control Program for CFX-9850 Series Convert EA-200 Control Program for fx-9860 Series u To convert a program 1.
PAGE 428
8-1 Starting a Sampling Operation 8 Starting a Sampling Operation The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON3 Mode to start a Data Logger sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4.
PAGE 429
8-2 Starting a Sampling Operation u To start sampling 1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described below. If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, press b(Start Setup). If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT). If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
PAGE 430
Clock Period Extended Sound Normal Fast Real-time Mode 1. Data Logger Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • The screen shown below appears when CH1, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 Outputting through speaker w Sample values is stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used. 1. Time and distance graph 2.
PAGE 431
9-1 Using Sample Data Memory 9 Using Sample Data Memory Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON3 Mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON3 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
PAGE 432
9-2 Using Sample Data Memory 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want to save, and then press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting a data name. 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
PAGE 433
9-3 Using Sample Data Memory u To rename an existing sample data file Note • You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name. 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH). • This displays the Graph Mode screen. 2. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to rename, and then press 3(REN). • This displays the screen for inputting a file name. 4.
PAGE 434
10-1 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
PAGE 435
10-2 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
PAGE 436
10-3 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
PAGE 437
10-4 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with square ( 5( ) 6( ) Line graph with square ( ) data markers ) data markers Scatter graph with X (×) data markers c.
PAGE 438
11-1 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.
PAGE 439
11-2 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K4(CALC) Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and “Performing Regression” on page 11-8. K5(Y=fx) Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to overlay on the sampled result graph.
PAGE 440
11-3 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Using Trace Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph. You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values. u To use trace 1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
PAGE 441
11-4 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values. • The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable letter key. 5.
PAGE 442
11-5 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
PAGE 443
11-6 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
PAGE 444
11-7 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier series expansion, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series. / 5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series. 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
PAGE 445
11-8 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Performing Regression You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic, Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic. For details about these regression types, see pages 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of this manual. The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression.
PAGE 446
11-9 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Press 6(DRAW). • This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph. • To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls). k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result graph. u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
PAGE 447
11-10 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW). • This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph that was originally on the graph screen. / Original Graph Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph • To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
PAGE 448
11-11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen. 4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen. 5. Press w.
PAGE 449
11-12 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • This displays the [EDIT] menu. 2. Press 2(MOVE). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear. 4.
PAGE 450
11-13 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. / 4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%.
PAGE 451
11-14 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Configuring View Window Parameters Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View Window function key menu along the bottom of the display. Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure. Function Key Description 1(Auto) Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
PAGE 452
12-1 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity 12 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON3 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips. u Econ SetupWizard strip This strip calls the E-CON3 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: Data Logger setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
PAGE 453
Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.
PAGE 454
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan SA2006-B © 2020 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.